Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical panels. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. such as duct. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. electrical. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. 3 . fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. Add more detailed modelling elements.

After completing each exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . you learn where the training files are located. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. and sheets to document the project. views. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create schedules. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. and tags. however. You do not design entire systems. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. is located and accessed in the training files location. your Training folder may be in a different location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. when you add ductwork. When you open a training file. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. When you install the training files as instructed. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. templates. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Create detail views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. as well as how to open and save them. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. On the Contents tab. Contact your CAD manager for more information. such as templates and families. Metric: files for users working with metric units. NOTE Depending on your installation. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. For example. Metric file names have an _m suffix. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. For example. In this exercise. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. So. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you can choose to save your work. annotations.

click ➤ Save As. 3 In the right pane. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. For File name. if you open settings.rvt) is selected. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For example. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. and click Save. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. and click Open. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt and make changes. For Files of type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Accessing Training Files | 5 . verify that Project Files (*. you are prompted to save the changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name. scroll down. 4 Click the training file name. double-click Imperial or Metric. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and you can open any supported file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt. and click the Training Files icon. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. the Open dialog displays. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. drawing sheets. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. quantities. schedules. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In the Revit MEP model. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. ■ ■ 7 . hence. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You learn the terminology. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the operation of the software is parametric. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the door retains this relationship to the partition. scope. and phases when you need it. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. drawings. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. If the length of the elevation is changed. sections. and plans. the floor or roof remains connected. If you move the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. 2D and 3D view. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.

Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ducts. filled regions. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. boilers. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and reference planes are datum elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Datum elements help to define project context. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sprinklers. sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ducts. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and keynotes are annotation elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. grids. For example. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. dimensions. levels. boilers. sinks. For example. When you change something. sinks. They help to describe or document the design. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and electrical panels. and electrical panels.

Project: In Revit MEP. views of the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. If you can draw. In other cases. you can explicitly control them. and types.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. This information includes components used to design the model. first floor. section views. Often. top of wall. families. floors. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and drawings of the design. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. For example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. such as roofs. In Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. By using a single project file. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Most often. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you must be in a section or elevation view.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. elevation views. To place levels. schedules. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. programming is not required. and ceilings. or bottom of foundation. and so forth). categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. for example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. North . However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. from geometry to construction data.

such as a A0 title block. and wires. pipes. However. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. System families can be transferred between projects. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. identical use.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). For example. showing. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can be a specific size of a family. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. System families include ducts. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can also display several project views at one time. Type: Each family can have several types. A type can also be a style. hiding. With a few clicks. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Then experiment with them. Unlike system and standard component families. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and similar graphical representation.

Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

and CAD files. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. then select what you want to modify.. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and settings. architect-specific tools.. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . data and systems. and for switching views. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. project and system parameters. select the tool first.

provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). For example. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. To keep a panel expanded. when adding duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides access to common tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a template and create a new drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Export) On the application menu.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save As) export the current drawing.. such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open. click. (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands..

click. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. but is not enabled by default. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. (Licensing) close the file. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. provides views including Default 3D.. (Publish) print the current drawing. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. or template file. or template file. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . publish the current project. annotation.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family.. and Walkthrough. annotation. to. (Print) access product and license information. To enable or disable a tool item. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server..

click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Modify.To undo or redo a series of operations. when you switch to another editing mode. However. To hide the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. or the Family Editor. In addition. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Clipboard. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clear the Status Bar check mark. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. To show the Status Bar again. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Starting with the most recent command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Group. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . displaying the same information. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. This displays the command history in a list. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. repeat the command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. workshared components. check the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. When you are using a command.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .

you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .rvt. 1 Click ➤ Open. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Zoom the view In the tutorials. In the following steps.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. For example. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.

Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. on the Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. When you release the mouse button. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE As you zoom in and out. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click . In the drawing area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 6 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Modifying the View | 19 . To modify or add snap increments.

14 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and click tin the Options dialog.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . and select the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls. referred to as shape handles. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.Design. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Small blue dots. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. as shown. display along the ends. bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. called drag controls.

22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z. on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click the Undo command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.

you want to move the duct. such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 10 Move the cursor to the right.Some commands. click to specify the starting position. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. such as the Modify Ducts command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Return. 14 Enter VG. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Click OK. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example.Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 13 To end a command. Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.End a command Some commands. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 5 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. and click Open. under Create new. use copy/monitor. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and geometry from the starting template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). the default building levels and standard views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. system families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. under Template file. create and manage views. You can either select a template from the template library. 6 Click OK.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and loadable families. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as the default project units and settings. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as coordination review and interference checking. New projects inherit all the families. You can choose from several templates. click Training files. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. settings. link files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. select Project. and modify system settings.rte template. Finally. 7 In the Project Browser. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 27 . and open North. such as ducts and pipes. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open Metric ➤ Templates.

select Level 1. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. ■ For Building Construction. Click Cancel. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click OK twice.8 In the drawing area. for Energy Data. When you select the material. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. ■ ■ Under Create new. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. click Edit. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. For example. create another new project using the Construction template. for City. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select School or University.rte template and click Open. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. navigate to Metric Templates. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. NH. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click (Browse). For Location. select Manchester. If you want to use a template other than the default. In the Choose Template dialog. you can select it now. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Project template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 10 Using the same method. Click OK. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.

000 mm. click Round. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. 110. piping. click Rectangular. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 27 Click OK.00 mm. select Identity Data. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Sizes. select Views. For Categories.00 mm. and 310. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. and demand factors for electrical systems.00 mm. 33 Click OK. click Wiring. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 22 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. and fire protection systems. 260.00 mm.00 mm. power distribution systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 24 In the right pane. 26 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. for 90.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 25 In the left pane. and 140. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Click OK twice.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 140.rfa and click Open. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 20.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. for 90. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. wiring. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Settings. Holding CTRL. plumbing. 290. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 110.00 mm.

For Then by. click Browse. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Sub-Discipline. For Then by. click Training. and groups that are contained in a project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Linking Projects In this exercise. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. In addition. To enable this coordination. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Auto . select Family and Type. 38 Close the file. From the Positioning list. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. under Template file. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that the file is saved as a template. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. families. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Select Ascending Click OK twice.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select View Name. For Sort by. under Create new. select Associated Level. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Project. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 5 Click OK. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.rvt. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m.Origin to Origin. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Click Open. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. sheets.

Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .Mech. 8 If necessary. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Linking Projects | 31 . under Constraints. select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select Room Bounding.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 12 Click OK.

18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.Floor. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 19 On the left side of the view. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Plan View types.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

Linking Projects | 33 . warnings notify you of any violations.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. indicating that a relationship is established. appears above the copied elements. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. and that the copied elements are monitored. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. level 3. 27 In the drawing area. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. After copying. a warning message displays. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. 29 In the drawing area. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. indicating that an element has changed. click Custom. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. and click to select the linked model. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click By Host View. for the link file. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. If you modify a monitored element. highlight the linked model. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. select Custom. and the level 4. 34 On the Basics tab. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories.

deselect Levels. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 3 In the View templates dialog. 5 On the Basics tab. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Planting. Under Visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Click OK. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click OK. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 36 Click OK. Roads. and Topography. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog. click Edit. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Select Show categories from all disciplines. select Custom. for the link file. Under Visibility. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Site. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North .■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. deselect Parking. click Custom. under View Properties. for Name. click Custom. 7 Click OK twice. you create a view template and apply it to your project template.

and your username when using worksharing. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. notification preferences. select Mechanical and click OK. click Browse. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. and click OK. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 5 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 8 Click ➤ Options. under View Templates. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click the Graphics tab.rte. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area is black.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 7 Click OK. 9 In the Options dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Colors. select Invert background color. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. journal cleanup options. selection default options.

When an error occurs. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 18 Select the wall. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 2 In the Options dialog. However. including your default project template. 11 In the Color dialog. 12 Click the General tab. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click the File Locations tab. select One hour. you specify default file locations. 21 Close the file without saving it. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Under Notifications. the elements causing the error display using this color. select yellow. and family libraries. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. family template files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Specifying File Locations In this exercise.10 Under Colors. select None. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 14 Click OK. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 7 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. such as in a large. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 8 Click Cancel. and you can create new libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. TIP To view a template. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations | 37 . or loading a Revit MEP file. ➤ New ➤ Project. Click and click Browse to select a template. centralized. click Places. and click Open. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. However. You can modify the existing library names and path. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. When you are opening. click Browse. In the following illustration. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. Save. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.3 Under Default template file. saving. 10 In the Places dialog. Load. 4 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. under Default path for family template files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. This path is set automatically during the installation process. note the list of library names.

click the My Library icon. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click (Add Value). and click OK twice. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. templates. Save. ➤ Open. and click (Browse). 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Under Library Name. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load.11 In the Places dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or families. and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and change the name to My Library. and click Open. click My Library.

enter sheetmtl-Cu. 9 In the text editor. click OK. 5 In the text editor. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 27 Click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 Click in the drawing area. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 12 Create a new project using the default template.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and decal image files. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click Edit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 22 Select My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 19 Click Cancel. click Places. view the current path. click Edit. 11 In the Options dialog. specify the new location here. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 3 Under Settings. 20 Click ➤ Options. If you work in a large office. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

You can turn snap settings on and off. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. click Edit.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click the Spelling tab. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 20 Under Settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click File menu ➤ Save. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.. delete sheetmtl-CU. work with snapping turned off. 23 In the text editor. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap increments. 19 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. under Dimension Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and enter 500 . As you zoom in and out within a view. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Training Files. click Browse. In this exercise. under Template file. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Close. you modify snap settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 18 Click ➤ Options. 24 In the Options dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. For example.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If you do not have a wheel button. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.

26 Close the file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and delete the value 500 . and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints. and specify the wall endpoint. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 19 Enter SM. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 25 Click OK. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the midpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.. and the wall edges. Notice that snapping is once again active. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. with or without saving it.

43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. However. This system consists of a cooling tower.autodesk. As you create the mechanical system. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you first plan the system. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you will understand the process. methodology. In this lesson. water source heat pump (WSHP). you first configure the linked architectural model. 45 . you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. If the tutorial training files are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this exercise. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you can choose to save your work. and then you create a plenum level. At the end of the tutorial. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory.

and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. These components are defined in the architectural training file. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.MEP. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. ceilings. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. In this section. and after the linked model highlights. and click OK.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and double-click West . not in the MEP training file. roof. under Constraints. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . you add a level for plenums. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select Room Bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. click to select it. NOTE When working with a linked file.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. enter 2600mm. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and enter Level 2 Plenum.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 9 On the Draw panel. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and click Properties. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click Level 2 Plenum. The new level is placed. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. For Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 16 Press Esc. Click Plan View Types. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and click OK. and in the Plan View Types dialog. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.

You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.Plenum. for Top. for Level. and then place spaces in various types of areas. enter an Offset of 300mm. and for Offset. For View Classification. select Level Above (Level 3). This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. For Cut plane. However. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. Under Extents. for Default View Template. select Plenum Plan. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for View Scale. Under View Depth. enter 0. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and click Apply Default View Template. click Edit. right-click Level 2 Plenum. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. For Sub-Discipline. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Design. ■ Click OK twice. select MEP . This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Identity Data. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In the next exercise. for View Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Horizontal. select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. walls. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. select New. Placing Spaces | 49 . 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For (Tag Location). indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. For Upper Limit. and ceilings). For Offset.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ensuring coordination between the files. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . for Number. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). For Name.7 Click to place the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 14 In the drawing area. enter Library. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. select Level 3. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. enter 0. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 25 Close the file with or without saving it. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Upper Limit. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 3. enter 0. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and for Offset.

7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and select Corridor. 10 Click in the number column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click in the name column. and change the space number to 216A. and scroll to the newly placed space. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. as shown. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 11 Close the schedule view.

place a space in the lower area of the split space.16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.

and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. If necessary. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 12 Click in the section view. 6 Enter VG. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Upper Limit. right-click. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. expand Spaces. and click Element Properties. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select Roof Level. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.4 Press Esc. select the space. select Interior and Reference. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the plan view. click in the chase area to place the space.

select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume.■ For Limit Offset. floors. All spaces in the view are tagged. Bounding elements (such as walls. enter 225PC. and maximize the view.Space Plan. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. For Number. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click OK. Under Identity Data. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter 1200. under Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. ceilings. enter Chase. 17 Type ZF. for Name. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 15 Press Esc.

Notice that Default is currently the only zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view. click Reference. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. After a space is placed in an area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. click View ➤ Zones. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In this exercise. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. under Spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . which removes the space from the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.Zoning is highlighted. it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. In the next exercises.20 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. To display space reference lines. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

The Zone tool is active. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. To display space reference lines. As you do this. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Reference. ) or 5 In the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click OK. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Energy Analysis.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). click Training Files. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and a new zone is created. under Spaces. select Occupiable. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .Zoning is highlighted. double-click 121 Cafeteria. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Next.

NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area. you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you can add or remove a space from the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. Using the Edit Zone tab. and modify the zone properties. select Computer Lab 222. Instruction. select HVAC Zones. 4 In the drawing area. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and click Finish Editing Zone. Instruction 221. Expand HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical 220 spaces. In the System Browser. Click OK. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Zoning view to activate it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and verify the zone in the System Browser.West .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 5 Click in the Level 1 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 11 Close the System Browser. enter 2 . click Reference. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area B. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. for Name. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning is highlighted. You activated zone visibility in the views. To display space reference lines. click Training Files. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. indicating that it’s the active view.West . under Spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise.TIP After you finish editing the zone.rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. expand 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 In the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. Verify that the distance is 12mm. Select Attached End. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. zoom out. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 8 In the Level 1 .

enter Lounge . you verify the building. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.East. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning view. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the ViewCube. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . In this exercise. for Name Value. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and click OK. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and select 109 Lounge. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). space.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. verify that Wireframe is selected. and zone information. Front.Zoning to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click the corner where the Top. double-click Level 1 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. click Training Files. double-click the zone tag.

select 1_South_Area C. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Using the Highlight tool. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Next. With 109 Lounge selected. click (Isolate). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ ■ On the Details tab. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Click (Highlight). TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. click . verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. click (Shading). verify that 21. the space information displays for the selected space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. cooling air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. scroll down in the left pane. select 109 Lounge. This indicates the outdoor air per person.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected.22 °C : N/A is specified. and in the People dialog. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that 23. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and dehumidification set point. For Electrical Loads. and air changes per hour.33 °C : 12. For Heating Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point.11 °C : 32. heating air temperature. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that <Building> is selected. For Cooling Information. For People. click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. outdoor air per area. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . and then click OK. and click OK. and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Construction Type. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the heating set point. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. select Lounge/Recreation. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.

68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and other room-bounding components. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. floors. For Offset. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Level 3. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. roofs. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 0. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. open MEP . 12 Using the methods learned previously. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 15 In the Project Browser. click Cancel. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

Under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. and zone information. and select space Plenum 212P. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. you verified building. Click OK. for Number. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Name. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. enter 212P. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select Plenum. Because this is an unoccupied space.

On the Weather tab. verify that Manchester. and click OK. For Export Complexity. this option adjusts the times automatically. under Volume Computations. select School or University. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Location. double-click Level 2 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Library 219. 8 In the drawing area. Click OK twice. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. On the Place tab. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. enter 03101. for City. for Energy Data. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Project Phase. right-click. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Postal Code. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that 300 is specified. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. If. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. and click OK. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you need to select this option. In order to select a space. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. for Building Service. under Energy Analysis. For Building Construction. For Ground Plane. click Edit.Space Plan. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.rvt. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. NH. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. click in the Value field. verify that <Building> is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance.

verify that <Building> is specified. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. For Building Service. Click OK. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Next. Click OK twice. For Condition Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. and click OK. NH. a cooling load. 12 Click the Details tab. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Sensible. Under Power. select Library . In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Actual. Under Heat Gain (per Person). and then click . enter 60 W. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. For People. and enter 15 sq. both.Audio Visual. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Specified. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. select Actual. You have verified the building information. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Building Construction. For Latent. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. click Edit. or neither. is specified. Select Area per person. verify that School or University is selected. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click in the Value column. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). enter 45 W. for Values. for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. m. select Heated and cooled. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. For Space Type. Select the space associated with the warning. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. click Edit. verify that Manchester.

and click OK. 15 Review the loads report for project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog.11°C. or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. select 219 Library. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. 21 Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. space. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. select 219 Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 16 After you review the loads report. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 In the drawing area. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and under Heating Information. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. click Calculate. There should be no warnings displayed. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.Space Plan. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . or zone information. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. You should correct the space error in the building model. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. weather. click Information). ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and zone information for the building model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and a loads report displays. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and can be modified here.

4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. in relatively small increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. For Color Scheme. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the drawing area. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Zones. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. Click OK. 5 Zoom in to the legend. click Training Files.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. under Schemes. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK.Expanded Ranges. select Cooling Load . The new scheme displays in the view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select the color scheme legend.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. In the next exercise.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 11 Using the method learned previously. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.

For Name. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Available fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Formula. for Select available fields from. Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. enter Space Airflow Schedule. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Type. select New Construction. For Phase. select HVAC. Click OK.Space Fill is the active view. ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Calculated Value dialog. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. For Discipline. click (Browse).(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter . Select Schedule building components. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Calculated Supply Airflow. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. In the Fields dialog. For Formula. select Spaces. and then click . select Air Flow. and click OK. more category options are available. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

select Airflow Delta. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Under Conditions to Use. Header. and then click Conditional Format. verify that Show is highlighted. and then select Hidden field. and click OK. For Then by. select Not Between. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. select Number. In the Color dialog. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. click the color swatch. Select Ascending. select Level. select Level. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Value. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. For Background Color. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ The schedule displays. and Blank line. Click OK twice.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select red. For Fields. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. a view opens that contains the selected space. right-click to access schedule properties. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.

In this exercise. In later exercises. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model.

79 . learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. click Training Files. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and scroll to space 223.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. the space crossing lines display.

type 3600. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc to end the command. Also. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 215 L/s. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. If the host element is modified or moved. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. 17 Move the cursor down. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 9 On the Placement panel. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Flow. click Place on Face. and press Enter. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 22 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rfa. as shown. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. 24 In the Open dialog. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select one of the diffusers. click Yes. As you place the return diffusers. Next. 28 On the Placement tab. 21 On the Options Bar. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 29 Place 2 diffusers. and then press Esc. clear Leader. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Place on Face.

select Strong Reference. under Other.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Yes. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. and click to select the lines. 32 In the Project Browser. select one of the return diffusers. 31 In the alert dialog. and click OK. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. as shown. align the other return diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. and then press Esc twice. select the vertical grid line as shown. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 43 Using the same method. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. select both return diffusers. for Flow. right-click. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.44 While pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 47 Using the same method. As you place the air terminals. and press Enter. clear LeftArrow. under Mechanical. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. and on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 .

200 Neck. 10 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. at the lower left corner of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand HVAC . for Scale. the space crossing lines display. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 2 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.HVAC Plan .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. select M_Supply Diffuser . 8 In the Type Selector. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 9 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1 . click 1 : 100. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. and then press Enter.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. As a result. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Also. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. for Offset. enter 2400. move the cursor down. enter 170 L/s. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.Airflow. type 6000. 11 Select the diffuser. 15 Press Esc. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. By copying the diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. under Constraints. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Under Mechanical .

19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.16 Using the same method. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

select Air Terminals. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 29 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Mark. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and Flow. select Mark. for Flow. 25 Click OK 3 times. select 21. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. enter 210 L/s. and then right-click in the schedule. For Category. and press Enter. mark. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. under Available Fields. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Type. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. type. 26 Using the method learned previously. for Sort by. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 27 In the schedule. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. double-click System Type. Next. under space 115. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. it is a negative value. for Embedded Schedule. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and click View Properties. under Other. click Edit. tile the windows.

and maximize Level 1 .Design. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown.HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. As you highlight the zone. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. 31 In the drawing area. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.

36 In the drawing area.Horizontal .7-18 kW . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 35 In the Type Selector.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. select M_WSHP .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.43 W (approximately 1. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .3 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.High Efficiency . and under Energy Analysis.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.rvt.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. indicating that it’s the active view. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and click OK. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. right-click the title. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. for Constraints ➤ Offset. the space crossing lines display. and click View ➤ Systems. enter . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. After creating the logical connection. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. click Training Files. including energy analysis. 44 Zoom in to space 115. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. You then create the logical connection between the system components. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. However. As you add diffusers to systems. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Design is highlighted. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Connect Into. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. System Name. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 17 Using the method learned previously. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and Flow value. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 12 In the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. 15 Click Cancel. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and the system connects them. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. review the Number of Elements. On the Options Bar. the air terminals are the children. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click OK. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 11 In the drawing area. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent.

click Training Files. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical. 25 Click OK. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.Rename the system Next. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for System Name. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK. for Mark. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Identity Data.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. For Flex Duct Type. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and display solution 1. For Duct Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. which provides various layout tools. the space crossing lines display. select Network. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . the Network type provides several solutions.Round. In this case. select the upper left diffuser. enter 3000. for Solution Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. click Settings.HVAC Plan. 4 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. For Duct Type. A Generate Layout tab displays. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Offset. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 7 On the Options Bar. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. Also.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. enter 3000. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.

If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. For example. or offset elevations are incorrect. Click OK. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. or manually modify the duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. enter 900. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. you’ll get an error in a later step. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 11 Click Finish Layout. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. fittings. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Usually. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The first time you press Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click OK. and equipment.Flow. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. select Duct Color Fill . thus it is not part of the system. If the entire network does not highlight. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Color Scheme. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. a disconnection exists. Using a flow-based color scheme.

and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click OK. select the WSHP. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Graphics.Airflow.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and on the Options Bar. for Flow. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. but not all values are used in this view. select By View. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and then click OK. for Values Displayed. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and press Enter. select one of the diffusers in the system.

and then click to select it. select Calculated Size Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.65 Pa/m. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and select 400. for Schemes. click Cancel. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Select Only. select the color scheme legend. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Select Restrict Height. Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Duct Color Fill . you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and then press Esc to clear the selection.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter .Velocity. Click OK. and drag it to the right. 26 Click OK.

100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Using this tool. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Use the information that displays (flow. static pressure. pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system.rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. 35 Click Finish.

6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . and select the WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. enter 3000. and click Draw Duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. NOTE When drawing duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. double-click MEP .3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . select the top right diffuser. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector grip. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Front.

and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.22 Using the same method. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow.Airflow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. such as a plenum. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. select a segment of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. 40 Using the same method. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click to select it. and then click OK.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Constraints.

108 .

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. In this lesson. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. on level 3 of the building model. Create return and supply piping systems. Then. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you place mechanical equipment. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. including 2 base mounted pumps. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Automatically and manually lay out piping. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

Design is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. click Training Files.7-18kW .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . in corridor 328. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and select M_WSHP . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Left Return . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.HVAC Plan .rvt.Horizontal High Efficiency . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the dimension. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Wall faces is selected.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 600. 8 Click the corridor wall face. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 10 Select the WSHP.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector.

above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. enter 0. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Click OK. 21 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . for Offset. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. for Water Flow. enter 2750. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.75 L/s. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.

Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. but without a corresponding system. analyses cannot be performed. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Unlike logical connections (systems).

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. right-click the Systems column heading. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display indicates that the system is selected. where it is easier to review the information. while pressing Ctrl. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Creating a Piping System | 115 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 5 In the System Browser. Therefore. In the System Browser.Design is highlighted. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. As you assign equipment to systems.rvt. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. indicating that it’s the active view. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select the 2 WSHPs. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.Mech 330). 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Assigning a system component to an existing system. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.

Notice that on the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and the Edit System tool is not active. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Editing System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. 17 On the Options Bar.

The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In heating mode. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. In cooling mode. 23 Close the roof plan view.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. and select the cooling tower. and bypasses the cooling tower.Design. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Creating a Piping System | 117 . and click OK.

for Water Flow. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. enter 0. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.8. 28 Using the same method. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you can view several parameters. and click Select. under Mechanical. 29 Right-click CHWS. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Column Settings. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click OK. and click Expand All. indicating the logical connection. expand Piping. You also manually modify the layout path as required. including the flow rate and size of the component.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and click OK. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. A system preview displays in red. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog displays. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. When you draw a box to select components. the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Mechanical Equipment. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .rvt. press Tab to highlight the system. 5 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . you can place the cursor over a system component.Mech 330). and click to select it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. click Check None. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture. 10 Click OK. click Settings. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that Solutions is selected. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. duct. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. select CHWR. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. enter 450. or architectural components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.9 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. structural beams. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. select Perimeter.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for each WSHP is 0.75 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . and press Tab 3 times. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. With each Tab. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .75 L/s). under Mechanical. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.50 L/s. 23 Under Mechanical.50 L/s. 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 1. and access its instance properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

click Edit System.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . 27 On the System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). double-click Level 1 . 32 Click Finish Editing System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Logically.

extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.50 L/s.94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical. which propagates flow throughout the system.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 35 Using the drag control.44 L/s. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. so the total flow of 6. as shown. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.94 L/s. access its instance properties. you physically close the CHWR loop. note that the value for Flow is 4. 38 Using the same method. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. Next. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 450. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWS. 41 Click OK. and then click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Inset. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. enter 0. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Slope. Click Settings. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.00%. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 47 In the drawing area. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

Either relocate the system components. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 50 Using the same method. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect.

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . double-click 3D Building.Design is highlighted. as shown. and the return pipes are magenta.

7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. 9 In the 3D view. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and click OK. The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the lower one is secondary.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).

and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 381. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 600. for Offset. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click the minus symbol. and click to draw the pipe. as shown. and select it. you select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector.

and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.28 Press Esc. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. enter 1200. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. and click Draw Pipe. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 2850. and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter.■ Move the cursor down. for Offset.

you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system.

select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. 43 Press Esc.44 L/s. 40 Click Cancel. as shown.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 48 In the plan view. right-click. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. the value is 0 L/s. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click Element Properties. Connect the cooling tower Next. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. which is rounded up to 3. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .22 L/s (1/2 of 6.50 or 50% of the Flow. 46 Press Esc. under Mechanical.44 L/s). under Mechanical. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 44 In the 3D view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 41 Using the same method. notice that Flow is 6. notice that under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water bypasses the cooling tower. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. and is heated by the boiler.52 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown.rvt.Design is highlighted. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . When the valve is open.

and select M_Ball Valve . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. Adding Valves | 145 .4 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. place another M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. right-click. under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate that the Flow is 6. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. and click OK. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. 19 Using the same method. Adding Valves | 147 .

Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 22 Using the method you just learned. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Sizing Pipe In this exercise.44 L/s. 20 Select the bypass valve. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode. Initially. click Training Files. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. validate that the Flow is 6. and select M_Ball Valve . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Sizing Pipe | 149 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .Flow. for Schemes.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Size.

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .5 m/s. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. Click OK. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). enter 1. Either relocate the system components. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Select And. select Friction. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and for Velocity. or offset elevations are incorrect. 13 Press Esc. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. Inspecting the System In this exercise. pressure.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 151 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. click Training Files.14 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D Building. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.rvt. Using the System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design. as shown.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. An inspection flag reports the section number.

the Static Pressure is 41916. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and double-click Level 3 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you need to validate them. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method.0 L/s. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. select 32° C. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. targeting those systems that need attention.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and to size pipe. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. 10 Click Finish.7. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Warnings display. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.4 Pa. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .1 Pa. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and click OK. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Note that the Flow is 1.Design.rvt.

Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you assign components to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and click View. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. click Close. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and select Level 3 .Design floor plan.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. expand the Unassigned folder. For example. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 4 In the System Browser. 10 Using the same methods. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and confirm unassigned system components. 9 Right-click CHWS.Design ➤ Floor Plans. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). TIP If you have multiple views open. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.HVAC Plan . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 7 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 12 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As you learned when placing components. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. right-click the Systems titlebar. and for pipe sizing. otherwise. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. the pipe is associated with that system. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . thus assigning the components to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. right-click Hydronic Return. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. After you have assigned all components to systems.Design.

Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

156 .

157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .

Click OK. distribution systems. For Material. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. enter 70. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Wire Sizes. wiring. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.04. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. As you place components and create circuits. expand Wiring . ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Temperature.rvt. speeding up the design phase. select Copper. select Wiring Types. click Training Files. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. click (Open). enter THHN. select 90. You also add a wiring type. For Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

select 240. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Wires. Click OK. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. enter 50. select Single. enter 2000. By specifying a range. select Demand Factors. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For L-G Voltage. Under More Than. select THHN. For Neutral Multiplier. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Hot Conductor Size. For Phase. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 1. select 75. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For L-L Voltage. For Insulation. select Distribution Systems. For Conduit Type. Click Split. select 10000 VA. For Maximum. select Power. For Value. select Voltage Definitions. Select Neutral Required. For Minimum. select 120. For Neutral Size. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.0. select 3. enter 240. enter 250. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 120/240. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select Steel. enter 240. enter 220. For Max Size.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating.

For Group Parameter Under. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter Required Lighting Level.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. such as offices. Under Categories. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. restrooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. select Electrical .Lighting. under the Electrical . and conference rooms. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Open). under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Training Files. select Spaces. 5 In the drawing area. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and double-click Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK twice. Verify that Instance is selected.Lighting group in the space element properties.rvt. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. Later in the tutorial.Lighting Plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. select Electrical. click Add. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. For Type of Parameter. select Illuminance.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For Discipline.

9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click Required Lighting Level. select Spaces. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.Lighting. enter 485. enter Lighting Levels. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and for Key Name. Select Schedule Keys. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. For Name. Click OK. under Electrical . and click OK. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. enter Open Office. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. under Available Fields.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . change the sort order back to the default setting.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Select Blank Line. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 21 Click OK twice. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Required Lighting Level. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. click Edit. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Notice that as you enter the data. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. 22 Using the same method. which is mapped to project units. for Sorting/Grouping.

Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. for Lighting Levels. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. the value input applies only to the selected space. under Identity Data. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. click (Open). select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. select Instruction-Standard.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In this exercise. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . that Required Lighting Level is blank. 27 Click OK. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Later in this exercise. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

and press ENTER. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. and click (Add Value).00 lx. enter 200.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. then the new value will be 400 lx. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 800. select Required Lighting Level. enter Required Lighting and click OK. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . verify the By Range is selected. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter Required Lighting Levels. and press Enter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. Under Schemes. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.00. Select the scheme for 500 lx. and click (Add Value) five times.00 lx. select Spaces. enter 900. and press ENTER. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. for Category. Select the scheme for At Least 20. click Training Files. ■ Click OK. For example. click (Add Value) again. and in the At Least column. click (Duplicate). for Title.rvt. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. For Color. Select the scheme for 450.00 lx. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.00. for Name. 00 lx still selected.

8 In the drawing area. For Color Scheme. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Illuminance.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . select Electrical. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . Level.Lighting CF. Click OK. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Name. double-click Number. 13 Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. Average Estimated Illumination. for Available Fields.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Required Lighting. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. For Type. enter Lighting Delta. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. and Required Lighting Level. For Name.

select Level. Select Blank Line. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. type a hyphen. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click Conditional Format. and click Browse. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Value. Click OK twice. Click OK three times. select Required Lighting Level. for Test. for Sort by. click Browse. select Average Estimated Illumination.■ For Formula. for Fields. for Formula. select Red. select Not Between. select Lighting Delta. Select Header. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. press the spacebar. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. On the Formatting tab. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. under Condition.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First. 171 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create power loads. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Project Browser. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. By using orange as the color for this range. select Orange. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. Click OK.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Scheme Definition. for Basic Colors. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting CF view is open. 7 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open).rvt. select Average Estimated Illumination.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You can create additional color schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click Training Files. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color legend. for the Spaces Category. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. In the Color dialog.

with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. zoom to space Library 219. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). which is the lowest value in the specified range. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range is satisfied. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 19 Press ESC to end the command. the fixtures will move accordingly. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.277V. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 18 Click to place the fixture. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. for Apparent Load. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter 162. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. scroll to view space space Library 219. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. In the Name dialog.00 VA. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Name enter and click OK. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

00 lm. junction boxes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Photometrics. for Lamp. Click OK. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. select Xenon and click OK. click (Open). ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Placing Switches.93. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux.rvt.ies and click Open. Junction Boxes. for Color Preset. Junction Boxes. for Ballast Loss Factor. select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Intensity. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the Select File dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Under Photometrics. and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.85. enter . Under Electrical. you add switches. enter . for Type Mark. In the next exercise. ■ Click Apply. 2 In the drawing area. 9 In space Library 219. and receptacles to your design. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter F15. click the value for Initial Color. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. specify 15000. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Under Photometrics. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. select the top center fixture.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

12 In the Load Family dialog. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.NoLoad. Select M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. The element type M_Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.

15 Select the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. enter JB-1NL. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . enter 2750. Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. note the Number of Poles is 1. Click OK twice. NOTE When entering values. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . for Mark. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Offset.

Select Size.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. 26 In the System Browser. Space Name. 24 For any column. and Number of Elements. and Receptacles | 187 . Junction Boxes. Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Placing Switches. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. NOTE If necessary. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. right-click and click Column Settings. Distribution System. Space Number. Click OK. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Voltage.

31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar.

43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

click Training Files.rvt. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .Surface: 100A. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220.equipment.208V MCB . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. 9 On the Options Bar.480V MCB . enter 20. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 15 On the Options Bar. For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Max. 8 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name. enter LP-2B. select 120/208 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. Click OK. 14 Select the panelboard.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. and for Category. Click OK. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 20 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.

35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and create permanent wiring. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Wires. except without wire. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt.Loads. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. 42 In the Filter dialog.39 Using the same method. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open).

17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Rating. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. expand Power. Expand Electrical. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Voltage. Distribution System. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 13 In the System Browser. and verify that Load. and Voltage Drop are selected.

Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. change the Voltage to 277V. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 22 With the junction box still selected. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 30 Close the System Browser. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Tags. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.

for Type Mark. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 40 Click OK twice. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Click Yes. enter FR4. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . click below the first one to place it. For Circuit Number. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 47 In the drawing area. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. select Break. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. under Identity Data. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 35 Press ESC to end the command.

■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Lighting Fixture Tags. enter a comma. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 52 In the Save As dialog. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK.rvt. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for File Name. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Click OK. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click Save. click Check None. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 57 In the Filter dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and for Category. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Training Files. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and click Apply.rfa. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 54 Select all of the tags. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.

12 Select the occupancy sensor. under Electrical Lighting. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.Lighting. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. for switch ID. enter b. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK.

click Check None. click (Open). 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 2. under Electrical . and click Element Properties. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. for Hot Conductors. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuits are used for power. select the PP-2B panel. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and data systems. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.Loads.

and click Open. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 19 Click OK. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.rfa. select Wiring.13 Select the wire again. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the right pane. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the drawing area. and click to select the circuit. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. 28 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Next you balance the loads for your design. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. select panel LP-2B. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. the distribution is shifted. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 6 Click OK. enter 30A. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. click Open. for Rating. 1-#10. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Scroll down. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Rebalance Loads.rvt. click Training Files. Had there been a greater imbalance. 1-#12. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the drawing area. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. After re-balancing loads. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 1-#12.

18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. select the transformer TP-2B. under Electrical . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 25A. enter 40A. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Close the warning dialog. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating.Loads. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. and click OK. 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. under Electrical . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click Finish Editing Circuit. and click OK.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. Next you create a panel schedule.

Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Under Body Text. click Edit. for Font. 10 Click OK twice. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font Size. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. click (Open). Under Header Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. select Bold and Italic. Click OK. Select PP-2B. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 5 mm. expand Sheets (all). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Other. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. The Panel Schedule Report displays. click Training Files. and open E601 . the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. for Font Size. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. enter 4 mm. select Berlin Sans FB. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 6 In the Project Browser.Panel Schedules.rvt. for Appearance. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

click Training Files. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. press TAB once. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. select space Lounge 212. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. each with a load of 180VA.rvt. click (Open). 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. In the System Browser. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 15 In the dialog. Checking Your Design | 215 . 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. for Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 20 On the Options Bar.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. under Warnings.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

and click OK. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. 4 In the Name dialog. In this exercise.rvt. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Vent.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. right-click PVC . click Training Files. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Plumbing Plan . Adding a pipe size. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. planning is critical to a successful design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. type PVC . you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary. and click Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in addition to loading existing families. 219 . In this lesson.

9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Sch 40 .5 In the Type Properties dialog.000 mm. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 For System Type.Vent is listed. enter 54.DWV: Standard. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . select Sanitary. and click Main.293 mm. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. enter 10°. enter 45.Sch 40 . select M_Tee Sanitary . Tap. select None. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 6 Click OK.PVC . and open Metric\M_Trap P .rfa. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 46. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 13 In the right panel. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter -1250. 26 Click OK. under Pipe Types. For Offset. select Tee. select Branch. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. PVC . 27 For the new pipe size. 21 In the right pane. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.Sch 40 . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and click OK.PVC . Tee.006 mm. select Plastic. 17 In the left pane. under Mechanical. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 10 On the Selection panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Material. for Nominal. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Training Files. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 24 For Inside Diameter. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. In the Project Browser. 25 For Outside. click Pipe Settings.DWV. click Modify. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV: Standard. Cross. 22 Click New Size.PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 15 For System Type.

Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the cold water system. 221 . including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. vent. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

16 In the Select a System dialog. The base is placed. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. as shown. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system. a toilet. and click OK. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.

enter 1. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.05%. and click OK. 25 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -350 mm. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -1225. and modify it to meet project requirements. and click Settings. select PVC . The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.Sanitary. select PVC . 29 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. The default settings are automatically modified.19 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Modify. for Solution Type. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 21 On Options Bar. select Intersections. 26 For Pipe Type. 27 For Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select 100 mm. enter -350 mm. 28 On the Options Bar. 24 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Branch. select Main. 23 For Pipe Type.Sanitary. for Diameter. for Slope. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. You accept this suggested solution. and for Offset.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

37 On the Generate Layout panel.36 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . select the fitting and click to reorient it.Overall.

and check the slope control. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Rectangular. as shown. in the Type Selector. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Public.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). select 560 mmx560 mm . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel. under M_Lavatory . 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 Select the sink. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 711.2. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. On the Options Bar.7 Click Modify.

14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .16 On the Edit System panel. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. double-click 3D Plumbing .Overall. click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 21 Select the tee.

05%. press Spacebar. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. 27 Click Modify.22 In the plan view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). with the tee fitting selected. for Offset. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and click Apply. enter 1. enter 760 mm. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. When you press the Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and when the vertical center line displays. 32 Select the double wye fitting. select Standard. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .PVC . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .DWV. 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.

right-click the right connector. In the next steps. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter. for Offset. 36 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. enter 150 mm. double-click the section head to open the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. enter 305 mm. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. as shown. and click to place the pipe.

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 46 In the section view. enter 150 mm. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. right-click the bottom connector. and press Esc.

DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 54 Click Modify. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. 52 In the plan view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 56 Using the same method. under M_Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.PVC . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. select the left P-Trap. enter 150 mm. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. 58 Using the same method.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. In the Type Selector. Press Esc. as shown. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

click Finish. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope.rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 62 On the Options Bar. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.05% is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Training Files.

5 Select the tee. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector.Sch 40 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Floor level line. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 10 In the 3D view. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design.Overall. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Section view. select the vertical stack. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. click Modify. select Standard.Plumbing Plan .PVC .DWV.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

you can choose to save your work. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. If the tutorial training files are not present.rvt. You create a new pipe type. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. go to http://www. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After finishing each exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. and click Duplicate. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this lesson. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.autodesk. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. However. 267 . you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.

Next. duct. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Main. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Fire Protection Wet. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . or architectural components. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 9 Click OK. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In this exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In the next exercise. However. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 2800 is specified. for Material. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. and then click OK. and enter Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and click Properties. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. structural beams. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 6 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For System Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. In the left pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. For Offset. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 2800 is selected. select Carbon Steel.

6 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. for Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. select Spaces. select the upper half of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. select Fire Protection. Under Categories. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. right-click. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select space Instruction 221 as shown. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and click Element Properties. 8 Using a crossing window. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display. and then click OK. click Add. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Name. enter Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Zone 1. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Design is highlighted. under Fire Protection.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.

verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. including a calculated value parameter. and then access instance properties. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. click Training Files. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK.rvt. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. to which you add various parameters.

double-click on each column separator. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 7 Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. enter Light. 6 Using the same method. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. select Fire Protection. select Length. The schedule displays. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Rounding.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 11 Click OK twice. select Spaces. and on the ribbon. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add Parameter. Obstructed-Combustible. enter Maximum Spacing. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Units. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Design is highlighted. For Name. select mm. Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 9 On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select 0 decimal places. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. and click Field Format. For Unit symbol. For Key name. enter Protection Area Construction Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Millimeters. For Group parameter under. For Type of Parameter. Select Schedule keys. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 14 Select the new header. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. click the Formatting tab. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 10 In the Format dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .

Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Extra. and press Enter. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter 4575. Click OK. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 40. For Name. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

For Rounding. select Minimum Sprinklers. click . This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Area. 19 Click the Formatting tab. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select 0 decimal place. 22 Click OK twice. For Discipline. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. In the Fields dialog. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Fixed. select Number. For Units. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 20 On the Formatting tab. under Available fields. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Formula. For Type. Click OK.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click Field Format.

select Level. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance). and then click Field Format. select Sprinkler Zone. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. click Edit. for Sort by. select Minimum Sprinklers. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Hidden field. For Fields. For Then by. Under Field formatting. select Number. and click View Properties. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. for Sorting/Grouping. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and select Totals only. under Other.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. ■ In the Format dialog.

Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. click Edit. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and select Totals only. click Edit. select Embedded Schedule. System Name. delete the word Maximum. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 30 Click OK twice. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Filter. for Embedded Schedule. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. right-click the schedule. for Fields.27 In the drawing area. Under Field formatting. select Sprinklers. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. under Other. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and Count. select Calculate totals. select Count. for Filter by. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and click View Properties. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Formatting tab. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage.

41 In the plan view. 44 In the schedule. under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 43 Click Cancel.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 48 In the floor plan. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. but their values are not determined.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. and the spacing parameter values are evident. for Protection Area Construction Type. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and access the instance properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. select Ordinary. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 50 Access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. and click OK. 46 With the space still selected. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. As a result. for Protection Area Construction Type. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 Click OK. select Light. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. double-click FP . The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

go to http://www. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. As you create the system.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. 279 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. By following the recommended workflow. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. At the end of this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and double-click Level 2 . If the tutorial training files are not present.

This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

select the sprinklers that you placed. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. Also. 206. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 9 In space Instruction 202. and 207. 10 Press Esc twice. 11 In the drawing area. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.

Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and 200C). 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Type WT. as shown.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers. 200B. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then press Esc. specify a vertical offset.

under Constraints. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This number is determined in the schedule. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and press Enter. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.0. move the cursor to the right. After creating the logical connection. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. In this exercise. you adjust the offset. and click Element Properties.FP_Ceiling view. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Notice that the schedule updates. enter 2900 mm. and with piping (physical connection). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . 23 Right-click the sprinkler. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 25 Click OK. For Number. enter 11. Next.19 In the floor plan. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 4100. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. for Offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise.

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 5 Right-click the header. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Unlike logical connections (systems). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. click View ➤ Systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.Design is highlighted. as shown. However. and select Piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files.

Creating a Piping System | 285 .8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 11 With the system still selected. In the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and click Select. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. press Tab. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. select an initial piping layout. Next. indicating the logical connection. within the Piping Systems folder. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. named Fire Protection Wet. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system.

0 is specified. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). When the layout is finished. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. For Pipe Type. click Settings. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. select Branch. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 On the Generate Layout panel. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. select 150 mm. for Diameter. and a piping layout preview displays. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. system equipment. 19 Click OK. verify that Main is selected. and number of elements in the system. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 15 In the drawing area. 22 On the Options Bar.Wet is selected. 13 In the System Browser. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. providing system editing tools. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. enter FP Wet_Zone2. click Place Base. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 14 Click Finish Editing System. verify that 2800. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. as shown. In the left pane. click Solutions. enter -3650. For Offset. and on the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 12 On the Options Bar. for System Name.The Edit Piping System panel displays. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and green represents branch lines). Creating a Piping System | 287 . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. A (parallel movement control) displays. and select solution 4. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. or manually modify the pipe.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution. as shown. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 29 Click Finish Layout.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection.

and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design is highlighted. 3 If necessary. click Training Files. the Connect Into tool. and select the elbow fitting as shown. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 2 Zoom in. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and various manual pipe creation tools. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Next.

air terminals. and pipe or duct is created. click Add To System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 8 In the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. click Finish Editing System. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 9 On the Edit System panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). mechanical equipment. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. 5 In the drawing area. radiators. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. and then tile the views. for Solution Type. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Layout. 21 In the Piping Plan. 18 Click Finish Editing System. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. verify that Network is selected. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. verify that Solutions is selected. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar.

and then press Esc. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 25 Select the sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 27 On the Options Bar. select 2800. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Using the same method. 28 In the drawing area. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. right-click.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.24 In the Piping Plan.

■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. select 1 : 50.Design is highlighted. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.rvt. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Because the whole system highlights. 4 On the Options Bar. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Training Files.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

6 Press Esc. 8 Right-click. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

22 In the drawing area. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . Under Identity Data. and press Enter. 14 Select the tee fitting.Design. right-click Design ➤ FP . 10 In the Project Browser. enter 2135. and then right-click the top connector.Fire Protection Plan . For Default View Template. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Modify. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. For View Classification. for View Name. Click OK. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 17 Move the cursor up. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe. for Sub-Discipline. 19 Make Level 2 .Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 If necessary. 13 Select the elbow fitting. drag the top section boundary line up. select FP . and click Apply Default View Template. select Design. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select MEP Section. 15 Press Spacebar.Design the active view.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter FP Section_Stair. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

25 Verify that Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter.23 In the section view. select . 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and then click Modify. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 Select the cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is active.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.29 Close the section view.rfa. verify that M_Gate Valve . A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. and click Open.50 mm is selected. 32 In the Open dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. 33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify. as shown. click Yes to load a family.

you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click Training Files.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.

select 25mm. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 8 Click Modify. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and click OK. 6 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. or width. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. height. 4 In the floor plan view. width. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. or height. Changing the diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 7 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.

and after each segment highlights. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 12 If necessary. . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. click to place the tag. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. select the linked architectural file. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 18 In the 3D view. 17 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Tags are view specific.rfa. and click Open. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. By hiding the linked file. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Clear Leader. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Press Esc.

This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. press Tab. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. and when the section highlights. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm.

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. 24 In the drawing area. 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. select 40mm.

and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. For additional practice.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet fire protection system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this exercise. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You added tags to pipes.

304 .

create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

right-click Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. 307 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. dependent views.rvt. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click Properties. matchlines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. create dependent views for areas B and C. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click OK. more focused. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. as shown. 10 In the drawing area. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click Rename. and click Apply Default View Template. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 7 Close the file without saving. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. views and put them on the sheet. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Using the same method. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK. 9 Click OK. and then press Esc. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views.

click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. In the Color dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select black. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 19 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. For Line Weight. 13 Press Esc twice. select 11. click the current value. select Double Dash . For Line Pattern. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . and click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 21 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.20 Select the upper view reference and. as shown. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. on the Options Bar.

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.rvt. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. for View Name. 27 Using the same method. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and zoom to each of the view references.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. For Default View Template. and select the section box. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in.Domestic Water. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing Isometric. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.

right-click Plumbing Isometric . For Sub-Discipline. for View Classification. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 3. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Right-click. Click Apply. and then click OK. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Documentation. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select Dash. and click to select it.Domestic Water. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. The section crop lines no longer display. Click OK. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. select Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click to select it. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.

21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.5mm Arial.Isometric. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . select 1. and in the view properties. On the View Control Bar. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 19 Using methods learned previously. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. For Slope. specify Plumbing . and for Default View Template. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click on the Format value. verify that Common is selected. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and in the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.16 Press Esc.

click Training Files. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. as shown. When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. indicating that it’s the active view.■ In the Format dialog. select To the nearest 10.rvt. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 26 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

select 1 : 50. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. for Scale. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Creating Callout Views | 317 . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan).

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. using the same method. and select the viewport. select 5. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click OK. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. double-click M601 .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for View Name. right-click the callout view. Creating Callout Views | 319 .15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

26 In the Rename View dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Apply View Template.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. Creating Callout Views | 321 . under Names.

322 .

2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and annotation to create a legend. 323 . click Training Files. symbols. Creating Annotations In this exercise. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. linetypes. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. duct tags.rvt. as shown. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 1. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 8 With the text still selected. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 9 Press Esc twice.

verify that Leader is cleared.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. as shown. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 325 . 15 On the Options Bar. and then click Right Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a segment of round duct.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. under Category.17 Click Modify. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click Open. 25 In the drawing area. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa. as shown. If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. clear Leader. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. for Ducts. 21 In the Load Family dialog.

27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. and Attached End. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.26 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . select Horizontal. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.

as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice. for Leader.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and lock lighting fixtures.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. not simply an instance property. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. for Leader Arrowhead. you use temporary dimensions to locate. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 40 Using the method learned previously. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions | 329 .rvt. and click OK. That’s because you changed a type property. and all elements of that type are affected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. lay out. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select the last tag placed.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 12 Click EQ. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 14 Using the same method. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. select the dimension line. 13 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 2430. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. and offset them from the wall. Because the dimensions are locked. linework. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. and notes. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and press Enter. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.rvt. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 . 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. annotation symbols. 17 Press Esc. 20 Using the same methods. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line.9).

and select 1. For Scale. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 1 : 50.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Click OK.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Using the same method. For View. ■ 9 In the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 5 Click in the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.200 Neck. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Floor Plan.

11 Press Esc.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. Creating a Legend | 333 . 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 24 Select the component’s break line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 335 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line .39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

337 . A detail callout that references another view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. and text. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.113 East elevation view. indicating that it’s the active view.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. Next. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Using the same method. and then modify and align the views.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . clear Leader. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. select each of the 2 panelboards. and click to place it. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. 4 On the Options Bar.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

13 Right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. select the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 12 Select the Level 1 line. giving the appearance of a single view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click OK. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. right-click. for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and select Title w Line . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. as shown. 22 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. select the 113 East elevation view.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise. right-click. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and click Activate View. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Select the Level 1 line.

3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . click Training Files. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. expand Lines. As you draw. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. select 6. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. for Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. as shown. Under Modify Subcategories. for Line Weight. In the New Subcategory dialog. click New.113 North view. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . enter Electrical Power. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). notice that there are no snaps active.rvt. In the Line Styles dialog. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. verify that Chain is selected.

11 Using the same method. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 31 While pressing Ctrl. and select 1. select Multiple. 29 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 28 Click above the cap.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.

Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Using the same method. and press Enter. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . enter 12. 42 On the Options Bar.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.0. enter 3. enter 7. for Offset. change the length of the bottom line to 3. You enter exact values for each line length. click on the length dimension value. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. you can ensure that they stay together. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 40 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Press Esc. and press Enter.

54 Select the group. enter Ground. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. 47 In the drawing area. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and then press Esc.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. while pressing Ctrl. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. expand Groups ➤ Detail. TP-2B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 51 Using the method learned previously. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and click OK. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 50 With the group selected. 52 Select the detail group. select all 3 lines. 46 In the Project Browser.

In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and will place it on sheet E01. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Rename. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Back. 2 Zoom in to view the section. select 3D Views. click Home. for Name. and Left sides converge. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and then click the corner where the Top. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the section box. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and click Apply View Template. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click the copy. and then press Esc. Walkthroughs.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 On the ViewCube. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. click Training Files. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.rvt. and double click Typical Make Up Air.

label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. select 3D HVAC Iso. 15 Using the same method.■ ■ Under Names. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Typical. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor down and to the left. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.18 Press Esc. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . under Extents. and then click OK. 19 Complete the text labels.

34 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Crop Region Visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and click Activate View.25 Click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 33 Right-click the view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and under Extents. and click View Properties.rvt. 30 On the View Control Bar. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 29 Right click the view. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 32 In the Instance Properties. scroll down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Crop View and Section Box. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and click Deactivate View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . click Training Files.

354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click Properties. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Documentation. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Sub-Discipline. 9 Zoom in to the component. click the point at the top of the drain. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For View Classification. select 1 : 5. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. as shown. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the view name. For Scale. select Plumbing. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Click OK.

P. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify. and then press Esc. for Type. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Concrete.I. 21 In the drawing area. select C. 18 With the filled region still selected. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

28 Click Modify. and then click to select them. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 23 In the drawing area. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. (Line). press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.

and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

press Tab to highlight the chain. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. for Name. 49 Click Modify. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle)..D. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK.

as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. press Spacebar twice.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

select Leader and Free End. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

and click to specify the second leader point.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select 15000 (Division 15 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click OK. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 76 To select the leader start point.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 71 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 80 Press Esc twice. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and click to specify the text insertion point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 72 If necessary. 81 Select the text note.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful